blob: 16786450313805488fc8cde7ff608cfb99a84dfb [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020024#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040026/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070039 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010042 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070046 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070047 */
48
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040049/**
50 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070051 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070058 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040059 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070071 */
72
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020073/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040074 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010088/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
102 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
108 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
109 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
110 *
111 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
112 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
113 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
114 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
115 * .release_buffered_frames().
116 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
117 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
118 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
119 */
120
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500121struct device;
122
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400123/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200124 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
125 *
126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 */
129enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132};
133
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
135
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800137 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
142 */
143enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
144 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
145 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
148};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200149#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
294 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100301 */
302enum ieee80211_bss_change {
303 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300315 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300318 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200319 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100322 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200326
327 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100328};
329
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300330/*
331 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
332 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
333 * filtering will be disabled.
334 */
335#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
336
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100337/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200338 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
339 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200340 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300341 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300342 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
343 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
344 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700345 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200346enum ieee80211_event_type {
347 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200348 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300349 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300350 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200351};
352
353/**
354 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
355 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
356 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
357 */
358enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700359 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
360 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
361};
362
363/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200364 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200365 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
366 */
367struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
368 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
369};
370
371/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200372 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
373 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200374 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200375 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
376 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200377 */
378enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
379 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200380 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200381 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
382 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200383};
384
385/**
386 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
387 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
388 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
389 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
390 */
391enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
392 MLME_SUCCESS,
393 MLME_DENIED,
394 MLME_TIMEOUT,
395};
396
397/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200398 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200399 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
400 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
401 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
402 */
403struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
406 u16 reason;
407};
408
409/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300410 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
411 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
412 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300413 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300414 */
415struct ieee80211_ba_event {
416 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
417 u16 tid;
418 u16 ssn;
419};
420
421/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200422 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200423 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200425 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300426 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300427 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200428 */
429struct ieee80211_event {
430 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
431 union {
432 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200433 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300434 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200435 } u;
436};
437
438/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100439 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
440 *
441 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
442 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
443 *
444 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200445 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
446 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530447 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100448 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
449 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200450 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
451 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100452 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200453 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300454 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200455 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100456 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
457 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
458 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
459 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200460 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200461 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
462 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200463 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100464 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
465 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200466 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
467 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
468 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700469 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800470 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200471 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
472 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
473 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300474 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100475 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200476 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
477 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100478 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
479 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100480 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200481 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200482 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
483 * implies disabled
484 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300485 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
486 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
487 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
488 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100489 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
490 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
491 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200492 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200493 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
494 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
495 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300496 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
497 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200498 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300499 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
500 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200501 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100502 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
503 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
504 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
505 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
506 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
507 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100508 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100509 */
510struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200511 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100512 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200513 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530514 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100515 u16 aid;
516 /* erp related data */
517 bool use_cts_prot;
518 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300519 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200520 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800521 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700522 u16 beacon_int;
523 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200524 u64 sync_tsf;
525 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100526 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100527 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300528 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100529 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200530 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200531 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
532 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100533 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300534 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100535 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200536 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200537 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300538 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300539 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
540 size_t ssid_len;
541 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200542 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100543 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100544 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100545};
546
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800547/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200548 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800549 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700550 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800551 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100552 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200553 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
554 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
555 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
556 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
557 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
558 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
559 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
560 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
561 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
562 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
563 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200564 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200565 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
566 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200567 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
569 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200570 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200571 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200572 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
573 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
574 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
575 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
576 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
577 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
578 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
579 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200580 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
581 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
582 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300583 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
584 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200585 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
586 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
587 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600588 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
589 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
590 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100591 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
592 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
593 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200594 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
595 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
597 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100598 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
599 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
600 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200601 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
602 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
603 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
604 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100605 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
606 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
607 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100608 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
609 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
610 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
612 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
613 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400614 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200615 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
616 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100617 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
618 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
619 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
620 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200621 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
622 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
623 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530624 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
625 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
626 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
628 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
629 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200630 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
631 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530632 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
633 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
634 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
636 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
637 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530638 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
639 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
640 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
641 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
642 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200643 *
644 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
645 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800646 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200647enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200648 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200649 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
650 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
651 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
655 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
656 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
657 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
658 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
659 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
660 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600661 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100662 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200663 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200664 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100665 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200666 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100667 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100668 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200669 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400670 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200671 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100672 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200673 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200675 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530678 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200679};
680
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200681#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
682
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200683/**
684 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
685 *
686 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
687 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530688 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
689 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200690 *
691 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
692 */
693enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
694 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530695 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200696};
697
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200698/*
699 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
700 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
701 */
702#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
704 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
705 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
706 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200709 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200710
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530711/**
712 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
713 * Rate Control algorithm.
714 *
715 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
716 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
717 *
718 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
719 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
720 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
722 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100723 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
724 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530725 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
726 * Greenfield mode.
727 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100728 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
730 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530731 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
732 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
733 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
734 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
735 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200736enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
737 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
738 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
739 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
740
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100741 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200742 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
743 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
744 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
745 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
746 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100747 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
748 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
749 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800750};
751
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200752
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200753/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
754#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200755
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200756/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
757#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
758
759/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200760#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200761
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200762/* maximum number of rate table entries */
763#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
764
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200765/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200766 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200767 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200768 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
769 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200770 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200771 *
772 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
773 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
774 *
775 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
776 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200777 *
778 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
779 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
780 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
781 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
782 * information
783 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
784 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
785 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
786 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
787 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
788 * information should then contain
789 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
790 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
791 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200792 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200793struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
794 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100795 u16 count:5,
796 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000797} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200798
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100799#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
800
801static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
802 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
803{
804 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200805 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
806 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100807}
808
809static inline u8
810ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
811{
812 return rate->idx & 0xF;
813}
814
815static inline u8
816ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
817{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200818 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100819}
820
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200821/**
822 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200823 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200824 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
825 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
826 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
827 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
828 *
829 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200830 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200831 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100832 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700833 * @control: union for control data
834 * @status: union for status data
835 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100836 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700837 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100838 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700839 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200840 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200841 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200842struct ieee80211_tx_info {
843 /* common information */
844 u32 flags;
845 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200846
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200847 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100848
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100849 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100850
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200851 union {
852 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200853 union {
854 /* rate control */
855 struct {
856 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
857 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
858 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200859 u8 use_rts:1;
860 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200861 u8 short_preamble:1;
862 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200863 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200864 };
865 /* only needed before rate control */
866 unsigned long jiffies;
867 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200868 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
870 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200871 u32 flags;
872 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200873 } control;
874 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200875 u64 cookie;
876 } ack;
877 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200878 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200879 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200880 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100881 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200882 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300883 u16 tx_time;
884 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200885 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200886 struct {
887 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
888 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200889 u8 pad[4];
890
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200891 void *rate_driver_data[
892 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
893 };
894 void *driver_data[
895 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200896 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700897};
898
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300899/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200900 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
901 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200902 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
903 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
904 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200905 *
906 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
907 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
908 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
909 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
910 */
911struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
912 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
913 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
914 const u8 *common_ies;
915 size_t common_ie_len;
916};
917
918
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200919static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
920{
921 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
922}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400923
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200924static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
925{
926 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
927}
928
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200929/**
930 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
931 *
932 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
933 *
934 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
935 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
936 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
937 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
938 *
939 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
940 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
941 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
942 */
943static inline void
944ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
945{
946 int i;
947
948 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
949 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
950 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
951 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
952 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
953 /* clear the rate counts */
954 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
955 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
956
957 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200958 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200959 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
960 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
961 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
962}
963
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400964
965/**
966 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
967 *
968 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
969 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
970 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
971 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400972 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
973 * verification has been done by the hardware.
974 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
975 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
976 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +0200977 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
978 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
979 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
980 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400981 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
982 * the frame.
983 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
984 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800985 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100986 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
987 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
988 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800989 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
990 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
991 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200992 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200993 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100994 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200995 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
996 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100997 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
998 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200999 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1000 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1001 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001002 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1003 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1004 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001005 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1006 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1007 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1008 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1009 * on this subframe
1010 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1011 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001012 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001013 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001014 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1015 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001016 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1017 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1018 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1019 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1020 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1021 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1022 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1023 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1024 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001025 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1026 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1027 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001028 */
1029enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001030 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1031 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1032 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1033 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1034 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1035 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001036 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001037 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1038 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1039 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1040 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1041 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1042 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1043 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001044 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
1045 /* bit 16 free */
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001046 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1047 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1048 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1049 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001050 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001051 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001052 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001053 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001054 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1055 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001056 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001057 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001058};
1059
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001060#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1061
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001062/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001063 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1064 *
1065 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1066 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1067 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001068 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001069 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001070 */
1071enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1072 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001073 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1074 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001075};
1076
1077/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001078 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1079 *
1080 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1081 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001082 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001083 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001084 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1085 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001086 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1087 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001088 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001089 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001090 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1091 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1092 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001093 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1094 * values were filled.
1095 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1096 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001097 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001098 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001099 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1100 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001101 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001102 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001103 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001104 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1105 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1106 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001107 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001108struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1109 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001110 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001111 u32 ampdu_reference;
1112 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001113 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001114 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001115 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001116 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001117 u8 rx_flags;
1118 u8 band;
1119 u8 antenna;
1120 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001121 u8 chains;
1122 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001123 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001124};
1125
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001126/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001127 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1128 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1129 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1130 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1131 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1132 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1133 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1134 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1135 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1136 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1137 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1138 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1139 * @data field.
1140 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1141 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1142 * length
1143 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1144 *
1145 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1146 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1147 * data.
1148 */
1149struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1150 u32 present;
1151 u8 align;
1152 u8 oui[3];
1153 u8 subns;
1154 u8 pad;
1155 u16 len;
1156 u8 data[];
1157} __packed;
1158
1159/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001160 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1161 *
1162 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1163 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001164 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1165 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1166 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001167 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1168 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1169 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1170 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1171 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1172 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1173 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001174 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1175 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1176 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1177 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1178 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001179 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1180 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001181 */
1182enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001183 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001184 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001185 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001186 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001187};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001188
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001189
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001190/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001191 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1192 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001193 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001194 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001195 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001196 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001198 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001199 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001200 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001201 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1202 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001203 */
1204enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001205 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001206 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001207 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001208 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001209 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1210 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1211 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001212 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001213};
1214
1215/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001216 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1217 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001218 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1219 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1220 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1221 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1222 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001223 */
1224enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1225 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1226 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1227 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1228 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1229
1230 /* keep last */
1231 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1232};
1233
1234/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001235 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1236 *
1237 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1238 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001239 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1240 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001241 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001242 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001243 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1244 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1245 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1246 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001247 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1248 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1249 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001250 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1251 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1252 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1253 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001254 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1255 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001256 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001257 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001258 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001259 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001260 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001261 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1262 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001263 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001264 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1265 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001266 *
1267 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1268 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001269 * configured for an HT channel.
1270 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1271 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001272 */
1273struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001274 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001275 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001276 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001277
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001278 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001279 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001280
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001281 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1282
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001283 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001284 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001285 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001286};
1287
1288/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001289 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1290 *
1291 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1292 * operation.
1293 *
1294 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1295 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1296 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1297 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001298 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1299 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001300 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1301 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001302 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001303 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1304 */
1305struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1306 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001307 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001308 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001309 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001310 u8 count;
1311};
1312
1313/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001314 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1315 *
1316 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1317 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001318 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1319 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1320 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1321 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001322 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1323 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1324 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1325 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001326 */
1327enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1328 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001329 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001330 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001331};
1332
1333/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001334 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1335 *
1336 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1337 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1338 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001339 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001340 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1341 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001342 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001343 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1344 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001345 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1346 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1347 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001348 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1349 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1350 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1351 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001352 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1353 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001354 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1355 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1356 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1357 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1358 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001359 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001360 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001361 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001362 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1363 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001364 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1365 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001366 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001367 */
1368struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001369 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001370 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001371 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001372 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001373 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001374
1375 u8 cab_queue;
1376 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1377
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001378 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1379
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001380 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1381
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001382 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001383
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001384#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1385 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1386#endif
1387
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001388 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1389
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001390 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001391 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001392};
1393
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001394static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1395{
1396#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001397 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001398#endif
1399 return false;
1400}
1401
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001402/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001403 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1404 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1405 *
1406 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1407 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1408 *
1409 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1410 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1411 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1412 */
1413struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1414
1415/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001416 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1417 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1418 *
1419 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1420 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1421 *
1422 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1423 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1424 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1425 */
1426struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1427
1428/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001429 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1430 *
1431 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1432 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1433 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001434 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1435 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001436 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1437 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001438 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1439 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1440 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001441 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1442 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001443 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001444 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1445 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001446 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001447 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001448 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001449 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1450 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1451 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001452 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1453 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1454 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1455 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1456 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1457 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1458 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001459 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001460 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001461 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001462 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1463 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1464 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001465 */
1466enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001467 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1468 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1469 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1470 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1471 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1472 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1473 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001474 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001475};
1476
1477/**
1478 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1479 *
1480 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1481 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1482 *
1483 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1484 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001485 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001486 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001487 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX on non-TKIP keys, may be used by the driver
1488 * as well if it needs to do software PN assignment by itself
1489 * (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001490 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1491 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1492 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001493 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1494 * data block:
1495 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1496 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1497 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001498 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1499 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Bergf9a060f2015-06-12 14:55:34 +02001500 * @drv_priv: pointer for driver use
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001501 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001502struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergf9a060f2015-06-12 14:55:34 +02001503 void *drv_priv;
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001504 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001505 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001506 u8 icv_len;
1507 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001508 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001509 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001510 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001511 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001512 u8 key[0];
1513};
1514
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001515#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1516
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001517/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001518 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1519 *
1520 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1521 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1522 * reverse order than in packet)
1523 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1524 * reverse order than in packet)
1525 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1526 * reverse order than in packet)
1527 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1528 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001529 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001530 */
1531struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1532 union {
1533 struct {
1534 u32 iv32;
1535 u16 iv16;
1536 } tkip;
1537 struct {
1538 u8 pn[6];
1539 } ccmp;
1540 struct {
1541 u8 pn[6];
1542 } aes_cmac;
1543 struct {
1544 u8 pn[6];
1545 } aes_gmac;
1546 struct {
1547 u8 pn[6];
1548 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001549 struct {
1550 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1551 u8 seq_len;
1552 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001553 };
1554};
1555
1556/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001557 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1558 *
1559 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1560 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1561 *
1562 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1563 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1564 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1565 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1566 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1567 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1568 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1569 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1570 * key_idx value calculation:
1571 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1572 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1573 */
1574struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1575 u32 cipher;
1576 u16 iftype;
1577 u8 hdr_len;
1578 u8 pn_len;
1579 u8 pn_off;
1580 u8 key_idx_off;
1581 u8 key_idx_mask;
1582 u8 key_idx_shift;
1583 u8 mic_len;
1584};
1585
1586/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001587 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1588 *
1589 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1590 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1591 *
1592 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1593 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1594 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001595enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001596 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001597};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001598
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001599/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001600 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1601 *
1602 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1603 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1604 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1605 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1606 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1607 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1608 */
1609enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1610 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1611 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1612 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1613 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1614 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1615 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1616};
1617
1618/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001619 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1620 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1621 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1622 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1623 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1624 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1625 *
1626 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1627 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1628 */
1629enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1630 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1631 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1632 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1633 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1634};
1635
1636/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001637 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1638 *
1639 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001640 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001641 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1642 */
1643struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1644 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1645 struct {
1646 s8 idx;
1647 u8 count;
1648 u8 count_cts;
1649 u8 count_rts;
1650 u16 flags;
1651 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1652};
1653
1654/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001655 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1656 *
1657 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1658 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1659 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1660 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1661 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001662 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001663 *
1664 * @addr: MAC address
1665 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001666 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001667 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1668 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001669 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1670 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001671 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1672 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001673 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1674 * if wme is supported.
1675 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001676 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001677 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1678 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1679 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1680 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001681 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001682 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001683 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001684 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1685 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001686 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001687 */
1688struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001689 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001690 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1691 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001692 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001693 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001694 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001695 u8 uapsd_queues;
1696 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001697 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001698 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001699 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001700 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001701 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001702 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001703
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001704 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1705
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001706 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001707 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001708};
1709
1710/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001711 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1712 *
1713 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301714 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001715 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001716 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1717 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1718 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001719enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001720 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1721};
1722
1723/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001724 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1725 *
1726 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1727 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1728 */
1729struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1730 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1731};
1732
1733/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001734 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1735 *
1736 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1737 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1738 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1739 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001740 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001741 *
1742 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1743 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1744 */
1745struct ieee80211_txq {
1746 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1747 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1748 u8 tid;
1749 u8 ac;
1750
1751 /* must be last */
1752 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1753};
1754
1755/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001756 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1757 *
1758 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1759 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1760 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1761 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1762 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1763 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001764 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1765 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1766 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1767 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1768 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1769 * algorithm.
1770 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1771 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1772 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1773 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1774 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1775 * CCK frames.
1776 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001777 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1778 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1779 * the FCS at the end.
1780 *
1781 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1782 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1783 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1784 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1785 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1786 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001787 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001788 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001789 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1790 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1791 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1792 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1793 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001794 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1795 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1796 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1797 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1798 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001799 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1800 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1801 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301802 *
1803 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1804 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001805 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001806 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1807 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1808 *
1809 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1810 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1811 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1812 *
1813 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1814 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001815 *
1816 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1817 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001818 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301819 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1820 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1821 * the stack.
1822 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001823 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001824 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1825 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001826 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001827 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1828 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1829 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001830 *
1831 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1832 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1833 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1834 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1835 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1836 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001837 *
1838 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1839 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1840 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1841 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1842 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1843 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001844 *
1845 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1846 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1847 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001848 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001849 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1850 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1851 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001852 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001853 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1854 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1855 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1856 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001857 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1858 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1859 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1860 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1861 * supported cipher suites.
1862 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001863 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1864 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1865 * for frames.
1866 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001867 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1868 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1869 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1870 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001871 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001872 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1873 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1874 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001875 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1876 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1877 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001878 *
1879 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1880 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001881 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001882 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1883 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1884 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1885 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001886 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1887 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1888 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1889 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001890 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001891 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1892 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1893 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001894 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001895 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001896 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001897 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1898 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1899 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001900 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001901 */
1902enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001903 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
1904 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
1905 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
1906 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
1907 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
1908 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
1909 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
1910 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
1911 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
1912 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
1913 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
1914 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
1915 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
1916 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
1917 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
1918 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
1919 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
1920 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
1921 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
1922 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
1923 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
1924 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
1925 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
1926 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
1927 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
1928 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
1929 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
1930 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
1931 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001932 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001933
1934 /* keep last, obviously */
1935 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001936};
1937
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001938/**
1939 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001940 *
1941 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1942 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1943 *
1944 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1945 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1946 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001947 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1948 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001949 *
1950 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1951 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001952 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1953 * along with this structure.
1954 *
1955 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1956 *
1957 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1958 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1959 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001960 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1961 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001962 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001963 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001964 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001965 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001966 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001967 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001968 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001969 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001970 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1971 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1972 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001973 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1974 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1975 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001976 *
1977 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1978 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001979 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1980 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001981 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1982 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001983 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1984 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001985 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001986 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1987 * can handle.
1988 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1989 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001990 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001991 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001992 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1993 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1994 * aggregation.
1995 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1996 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1997 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001998 *
1999 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2000 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
2001 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002002 *
2003 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2004 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002005 *
2006 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2007 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2008 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2009 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002010 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002011 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2012 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2013 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2014 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002015 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002016 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2017 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002018 *
2019 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2020 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2021 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2022 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2023 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2024 * neither enabled.
2025 *
2026 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2027 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2028 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002029 *
2030 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2031 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2032 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002033 *
2034 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2035 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002036 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002037struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002038 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002039 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002040 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002041 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002042 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002043 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002044 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002045 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002046 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002047 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002048 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002049 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002050 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002051 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002052 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002053 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002054 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002055 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002056 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002057 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002058 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002059 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002060 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002061 u8 uapsd_queues;
2062 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002063 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2064 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002065 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002066};
2067
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002068static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2069 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2070{
2071 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2072}
2073#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2074
2075static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2076 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2077{
2078 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2079}
2080#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2081
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002082/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002083 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2084 *
2085 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2086 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2087 */
2088struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2089 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2090
2091 /* Keep last */
2092 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2093};
2094
2095/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002096 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2097 *
2098 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2099 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2100 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2101 * @status: channel-switch response status
2102 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2103 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2104 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2105 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2106 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2107 */
2108struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2109 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2110 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2111 u8 action_code;
2112 u32 status;
2113 u32 timestamp;
2114 u16 switch_time;
2115 u16 switch_timeout;
2116 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2117 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2118};
2119
2120/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002121 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2122 *
2123 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2124 *
2125 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2126 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2127 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2128 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2129 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002130 *
2131 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002132 */
2133struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2134
2135/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002136 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2137 *
2138 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2139 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2140 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002141static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2142{
2143 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2144}
2145
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002146/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002147 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002148 *
2149 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2150 * @addr: the address to set
2151 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002152static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2153{
2154 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2155}
2156
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002157static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2158ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002159 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002160{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002161 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002162 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002163 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002164}
2165
2166static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2167ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002168 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002169{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002170 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002171 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002172 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002173}
2174
2175static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2176ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002177 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002178{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002179 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002180 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002181 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002182}
2183
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002184/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002185 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2186 * @hw: the hardware
2187 * @skb: the skb
2188 *
2189 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2190 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2191 */
2192void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2193
2194/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002195 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002196 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002197 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2198 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2199 *
2200 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2201 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002202 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2203 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2204 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002205 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2206 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2207 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002208 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2209 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2210 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2211 *
2212 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2213 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2214 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2215 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2216 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002217 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2218 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2219 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2220 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2221 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002222 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2223 *
2224 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2225 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2226 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2227 * based on the receive flags.
2228 *
2229 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2230 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2231 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2232 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002233 *
2234 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2235 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2236 * handler.
2237 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002238 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002239 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2240 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002241 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002242 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002243 *
2244 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2245 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2246 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002247 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002248
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002249/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002250 * DOC: Powersave support
2251 *
2252 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2253 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002254 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2255 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2256 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2257 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2258 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2259 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2260 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2261 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002262 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002263 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2264 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2265 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002266 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2267 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002268 *
2269 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2270 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2271 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002272 *
2273 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2274 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2275 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2276 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002277 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2278 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002279 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002280 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002281 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2282 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2283 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2284 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2285 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2286 * periods.
2287 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002288 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002289 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2290 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2291 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2292 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2293 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2294 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2295 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2296 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2297 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2298 *
2299 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002300 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002301 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002302 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2303 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2304 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2305 *
2306 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2307 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002308 */
2309
2310/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002311 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2312 *
2313 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002314 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002315 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2316 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2317 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2318 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2319 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2320 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002321 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2322 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002323 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2324 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2325 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2326 *
2327 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2328 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2329 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2330 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2331 *
2332 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2333 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2334 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2335 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2336 * - a list of information element IDs
2337 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2338 *
2339 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2340 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2341 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2342 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2343 * vendor information elements.
2344 *
2345 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2346 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2347 *
2348 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2349 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2350 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2351 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2352 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2353 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2354 *
2355 *
2356 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2357 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2358 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2359 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2360 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2361 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2362 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2363 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2364 *
2365 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2366 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2367 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002368 */
2369
2370/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002371 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2372 *
2373 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2374 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2375 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2376 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2377 *
2378 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2379 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2380 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2381 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2382 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2383 * hardware flags.
2384 *
2385 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2386 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2387 * turned off otherwise.
2388 *
2389 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2390 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2391 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2392 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2393 */
2394
2395/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002396 * DOC: Frame filtering
2397 *
2398 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2399 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2400 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2401 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2402 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2403 *
2404 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2405 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2406 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2407 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002408 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2409 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2410 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2411 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2412 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2413 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2414 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002415 *
2416 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2417 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2418 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2419 * or dropped.
2420 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002421 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2422 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2423 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2424 * the flag, but not clear it.
2425 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2426 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2427 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2428 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2429 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2430 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2431 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2432 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002433 */
2434
2435/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002436 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2437 *
2438 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2439 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2440 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2441 *
2442 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2443 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2444 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2445 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2446 * the driver code.
2447 *
2448 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2449 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2450 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2451 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2452 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2453 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2454 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2455 *
2456 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2457 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2458 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2459 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2460 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2461 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2462 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2463 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2464 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2465 * @sta_notify callback.
2466 *
2467 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2468 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2469 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2470 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2471 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2472 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2473 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002474 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002475 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2476 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2477 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2478 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2479 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2480 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2481 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002482 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2483 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2484 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002485 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2486 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2487 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2488 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2489 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2490 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2491 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2492 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2493 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2494 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2495 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2496 *
2497 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2498 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2499 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2500 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2501 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2502 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2503 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2504 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2505 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2506 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002507 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002508 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2509 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2510 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2511 *
2512 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2513 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2514 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2515 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2516 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002517 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002518 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2519 *
2520 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2521 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2522 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2523 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002524 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002525 *
2526 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2527 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2528 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2529 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002530 */
2531
2532/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002533 * DOC: HW queue control
2534 *
2535 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2536 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2537 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2538 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2539 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2540 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2541 *
2542 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2543 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2544 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2545 *
2546 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2547 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2548 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2549 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2550 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2551 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2552 * the hardware queue.
2553 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2554 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2555 *
2556 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2557 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2558 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2559 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2560 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2561 *
2562 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2563 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2564 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2565 * off-channel queue: 9
2566 *
2567 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2568 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2569 *
2570 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2571 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2572 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2573 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2574 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2575 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2576 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2577 *
2578 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2579 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2580 *
2581 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2582 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2583 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2584 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2585 */
2586
2587/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002588 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2589 *
2590 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2591 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2592 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2593 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2594 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002595 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2596 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2597 * multicast address.
2598 *
2599 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2600 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2601 *
2602 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2603 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2604 *
2605 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2606 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2607 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2608 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2609 * honour this flag if possible.
2610 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002611 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2612 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002613 *
2614 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002615 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002616 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002617 *
2618 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002619 */
2620enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002621 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2622 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2623 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2624 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2625 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2626 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002627 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002628 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002629};
2630
2631/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002632 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2633 *
2634 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2635 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002636 *
2637 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2638 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002639 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002640 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2641 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002642 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2643 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2644 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002645 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002646 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2647 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2648 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2649 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2650 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2651 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2652 * session is gone and removes the station.
2653 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2654 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2655 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2656 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002657 */
2658enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2659 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2660 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002661 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002662 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2663 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2664 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002665 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002666};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002667
2668/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002669 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2670 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002671 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2672 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002673 */
2674enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2675 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002676 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002677};
2678
2679/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002680 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2681 *
2682 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002683 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2684 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2685 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002686 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002687 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2688 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2689 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002690 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2691 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002692 */
2693enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2694 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2695 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002696 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002697 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002698};
2699
2700/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002701 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2702 *
2703 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2704 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2705 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2706 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2707 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2708 *
2709 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2710 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2711 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2712 */
2713enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2714 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2715 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2716};
2717
2718/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002719 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2720 *
2721 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2722 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2723 *
2724 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2725 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2726 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2727 * of wowlan configuration)
2728 */
2729enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2730 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2731 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2732};
2733
2734/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002735 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2736 *
2737 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2738 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2739 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2740 *
2741 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2742 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2743 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002744 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002745 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002746 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002747 *
2748 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2749 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2750 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2751 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2752 * or zero.
2753 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2754 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2755 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002756 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002757 *
2758 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2759 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2760 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2761 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002762 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2763 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002764 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002765 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002766 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2767 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2768 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2769 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2770 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002771 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2772 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2773 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2774 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002775 *
2776 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2777 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2778 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2779 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2780 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2781 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002782 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2783 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2784 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2785 * in suspend().
2786 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002787 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002788 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002789 * and @stop must be implemented.
2790 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2791 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2792 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2793 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2794 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002795 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002796 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002797 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2798 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2799 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2800 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2801 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2802 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002803 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2804 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2805 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2806 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2807 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2808 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2809 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002810 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002811 *
2812 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2813 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002814 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002815 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002816 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002817 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2818 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2819 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2820 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2821 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002822 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2823 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002824 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002825 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2826 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2827 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2828 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002829 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2830 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002831 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002832 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03002833 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
2834 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
2835 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
2836 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
2837 * which flags are changed.
2838 * This callback can sleep.
2839 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002840 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002841 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002842 *
2843 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002844 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2845 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002846 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002847 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002848 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002849 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002850 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2851 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2852 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002853 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002854 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002855 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2856 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2857 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2858 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2859 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2860 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002861 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2862 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2863 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2864 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002865 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002866 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002867 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2868 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002869 * that power save is disabled.
2870 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2871 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2872 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2873 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2874 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2875 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2876 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002877 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002878 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002879 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2880 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2881 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2882 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2883 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2884 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2885 * The callback can sleep.
2886 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002887 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2888 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2889 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2890 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2891 *
2892 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002893 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002894 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002895 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2896 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002897 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2898 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2899 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002900 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002901 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2902 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2903 * this notification.
2904 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002905 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002906 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2907 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002908 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002909 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02002910 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
2911 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
2912 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002913 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002914 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002915 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2916 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2917 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2918 * The callback can sleep.
2919 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002920 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002921 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002922 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002923 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2924 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2925 *
2926 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002927 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2928 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2929 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2930 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2931 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002932 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302933 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2934 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2935 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2936 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2937 *
2938 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2939 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2940 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002941 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002942 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2943 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2944 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002945 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002946 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2947 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2948 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2949 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002950 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2951 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2952 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2953 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2954 * The callback can sleep.
2955 *
2956 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2957 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2958 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2959 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2960 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002961 * The callback can sleep.
2962 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002963 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2964 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2965 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2966 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2967 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2968 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2969 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002970 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2971 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2972 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002973 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002974 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2975 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2976 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2977 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2978 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2979 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2980 * The callback can sleep.
2981 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002982 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002983 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002984 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002985 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002986 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002987 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002988 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002989 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002990 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002991 *
2992 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002993 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002994 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002995 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002996 *
2997 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2998 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2999 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3000 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003001 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003002 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003003 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3004 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3005 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003006 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003007 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003008 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003009 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3010 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3011 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3012 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003013 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003014 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003015 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
3016 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003017 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
3018 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
3019 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3020 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3021 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3022 * - TX: 1.....7
3023 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3024 * - TX: 8..1...
3025 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3026 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3027 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3028 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3029 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003030 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003031 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003032 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003033 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3034 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003035 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3036 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3037 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003038 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003039 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003040 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3041 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003042 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3043 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3044 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003045 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003046 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3047 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003048 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003049 *
3050 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003051 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3052 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3053 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3054 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003055 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003056 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003057 *
3058 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3059 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3060 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3061 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003062 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003063 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3064 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3065 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3066 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3067 *
3068 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003069 *
3070 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3071 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3072 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3073 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3074 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3075 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003076 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003077 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3078 * must be accepted in this case.
3079 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003080 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3081 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003082 *
3083 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3084 *
3085 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303086 *
3087 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3088 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303089 *
3090 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3091 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3092 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003093 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3094 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003095 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003096 *
3097 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3098 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3099 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3100 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003101 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003102 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3103 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3104 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3105 * more-data bit must always be set.
3106 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3107 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003108 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3109 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3110 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3111 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3112 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3113 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003114 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3115 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3116 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003117 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3118 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003119 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003120 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003121 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003122 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3123 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3124 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003125 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003126 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3127 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3128 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3129 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003130 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003131 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003132 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3133 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3134 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003135 *
3136 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3137 *
3138 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3139 *
3140 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3141 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3142 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003143 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3144 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3145 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3146 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3147 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3148 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3149 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3150 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3151 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3152 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3153 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3154 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003155 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003156 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3157 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3158 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3159 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3160 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3161 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3162 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3163 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3164 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003165 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3166 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3167 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3168 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3169 * channel context with different settings
3170 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3171 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3172 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3173 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003174 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3175 * another, as specified in the list of
3176 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3177 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3178 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003179 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3180 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3181 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3182 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3183 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3184 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3185 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003186 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003187 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3188 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3189 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3190 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3191 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003192 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003193 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3194 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3195 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003196 *
3197 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3198 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3199 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003200 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003201 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3202 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003203 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003204 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003205 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3206 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003207 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3208 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3209 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3210 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003211 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3212 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3213 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003214 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003215 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3216 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3217 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3218 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003219 *
3220 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3221 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3222 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003223 *
3224 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3225 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003226 *
3227 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3228 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3229 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3230 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3231 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3232 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3233 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3234 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3235 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003236 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3237 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3238 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3239 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3240 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3241 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3242 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003243 *
3244 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003245 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003246struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003247 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3248 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3249 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003250 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003251 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003252#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3253 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3254 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003255 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003256#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003257 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003259 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3260 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003261 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003262 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003263 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003264 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003265 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3266 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3267 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3268 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003269
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003270 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3271 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3272
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003273 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003274 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003275 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3276 unsigned int changed_flags,
3277 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003278 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003279 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3280 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3281 unsigned int filter_flags,
3282 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003283 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3284 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003285 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003286 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003287 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003288 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003289 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3290 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3291 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3292 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003293 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3294 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3295 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003296 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3297 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003298 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003299 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003300 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3301 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003302 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3303 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3304 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003305 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003306 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003308 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3310 const u8 *mac_addr);
3311 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3312 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003313 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3314 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003315 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3316 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3317 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003318 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003319 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003320 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3321 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3322 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3323 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303324#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3325 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3326 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3327 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3328 struct dentry *dir);
3329 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3330 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3331 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3332 struct dentry *dir);
3333#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003334 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003335 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003336 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3337 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3338 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3339 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003340 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3341 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3342 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003343 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3344 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3345 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3346 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003347 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3348 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3349 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003350 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3351 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3352 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3353 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003354 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003355 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003356 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003357 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3358 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3359 u64 tsf);
3360 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003361 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003362 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003363 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003364 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003365 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3366 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003367 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3368 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003369 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003370 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003371#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003372 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3373 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003374 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3375 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3376 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003377#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003378 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3379 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003380 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003381 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003382 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003383 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3384 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003385
3386 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003388 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003389 int duration,
3390 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003391 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003392 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3393 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3394 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303395 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303396 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3397 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003398 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3399 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3400 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003401
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003402 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3403 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3404 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3405 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3406 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003407 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3408 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3409 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3410 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3411 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003412
3413 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3415 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3417 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3418 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3419 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3420 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003421
3422 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3423 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003424
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003425 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3426 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3427
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003428 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3429 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3430 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3431 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3432 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3433 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3434 u32 changed);
3435 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3437 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3438 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3440 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003441 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3442 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3443 int n_vifs,
3444 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003445
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003446 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3447 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003448
3449#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3450 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3451 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3452 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3453#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003454 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3455 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3456 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003457 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3459 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003460
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003461 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3462 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3463
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003464 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3465 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003466 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003467 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3468 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003469
3470 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3472 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3473 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003474 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003475 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3476 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3477 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003478 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3480 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003481
3482 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3483 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003484};
3485
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003486/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003487 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3488 *
3489 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3490 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3491 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3492 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3493 * @priv_data_len.
3494 *
3495 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3496 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3497 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3498 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3499 *
3500 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3501 */
3502struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3503 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3504 const char *requested_name);
3505
3506/**
3507 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003508 *
3509 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3510 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3511 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3512 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3513 * @priv_data_len.
3514 *
3515 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3516 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003517 *
3518 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003519 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003520static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003521struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003522 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3523{
3524 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3525}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003526
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003527/**
3528 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3529 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003530 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3531 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3532 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003533 *
3534 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003535 *
3536 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003537 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003538int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3539
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003540/**
3541 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3542 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3543 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3544 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3545 */
3546struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3547 int throughput;
3548 int blink_time;
3549};
3550
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003551/**
3552 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3553 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3554 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3555 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3556 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3557 */
3558enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3559 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3560 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3561 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3562};
3563
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003564#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003565const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3566const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3567const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3568const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3569const char *
3570__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3571 unsigned int flags,
3572 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3573 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003574#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003575/**
3576 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3577 *
3578 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3579 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3580 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3581 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3582 *
3583 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003584 *
3585 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003586 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003587static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003588{
3589#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3590 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3591#else
3592 return NULL;
3593#endif
3594}
3595
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003596/**
3597 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3598 *
3599 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3600 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3601 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3602 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3603 *
3604 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003605 *
3606 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003607 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003608static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003609{
3610#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3611 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3612#else
3613 return NULL;
3614#endif
3615}
3616
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003617/**
3618 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3619 *
3620 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3621 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3622 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3623 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3624 *
3625 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003626 *
3627 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003628 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003629static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003630{
3631#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3632 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3633#else
3634 return NULL;
3635#endif
3636}
3637
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003638/**
3639 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3640 *
3641 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3642 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3643 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3644 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3645 *
3646 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003647 *
3648 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003649 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003650static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003651{
3652#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3653 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3654#else
3655 return NULL;
3656#endif
3657}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003658
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003659/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003660 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3661 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003662 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003663 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3664 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3665 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003666 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3667 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3668 *
3669 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003670 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003671static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003672ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003673 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3674 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3675{
3676#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003677 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003678 blink_table_len);
3679#else
3680 return NULL;
3681#endif
3682}
3683
3684/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003685 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3686 *
3687 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3688 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3689 *
3690 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3691 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003692void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3693
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003694/**
3695 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3696 *
3697 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3698 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003699 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003700 *
3701 * @hw: the hardware to free
3702 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003703void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3704
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003705/**
3706 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3707 *
3708 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3709 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3710 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3711 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3712 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3713 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3714 *
3715 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3716 */
3717void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3718
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003719/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003720 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003721 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003722 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3723 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3724 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3725 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3726 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3727 *
3728 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3729 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3730 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3731 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3732 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3733 *
3734 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3735 *
3736 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3737 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3738 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003739 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003740void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3741 struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003742
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003743/**
3744 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3745 *
3746 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003747 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3748 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3749 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3750 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003751 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003752 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003753 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3754 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003755 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3756 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003757 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003758 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003759 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003760 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3761 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003762 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003763static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3764{
3765 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, skb, NULL);
3766}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003767
3768/**
3769 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3770 *
3771 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003772 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3773 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003774 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003775 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3776 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003777 *
3778 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3779 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003780 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003781void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003782
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003783/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003784 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3785 *
3786 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3787 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3788 *
3789 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003790 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3791 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003792 *
3793 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3794 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3795 */
3796static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3797 struct sk_buff *skb)
3798{
3799 local_bh_disable();
3800 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3801 local_bh_enable();
3802}
3803
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003804/**
3805 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3806 *
3807 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3808 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3809 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3810 *
3811 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3812 *
3813 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3814 * each other.
3815 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003816 * @sta: currently connected sta
3817 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003818 *
3819 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003820 */
3821int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3822
3823/**
3824 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3825 * (in process context)
3826 *
3827 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3828 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3829 * applies.
3830 *
3831 * @sta: currently connected sta
3832 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003833 *
3834 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003835 */
3836static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3837 bool start)
3838{
3839 int ret;
3840
3841 local_bh_disable();
3842 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3843 local_bh_enable();
3844
3845 return ret;
3846}
3847
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003848/*
3849 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3850 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3851 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003852#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003853
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003854/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003855 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003856 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003857 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3858 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003859 *
3860 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003861 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3862 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003863 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003864 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3865 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3866 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3867 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3868 *
3869 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3870 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3871 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3872 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3873 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3874 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3875 *
3876 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3877 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3878 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3879 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3880 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003881 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003882void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3883 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003884
3885/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003886 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3887 *
3888 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3889 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3890 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3891 *
3892 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3893 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3894 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3895 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3896 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3897 */
3898void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3899 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3900 struct sk_buff *skb,
3901 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3902 int max_rates);
3903
3904/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003905 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3906 *
3907 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3908 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3909 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3910 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003911 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3912 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003913 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003914 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3915 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003916 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003917 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3918 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003919 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003920void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003921 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003922
3923/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003924 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3925 *
3926 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3927 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3928 * specific skbs.
3929 *
3930 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3931 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3932 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3933 *
3934 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3935 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3936 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3937 * @info: tx status information
3938 */
3939void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3941 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3942
3943/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003944 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3945 *
3946 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3947 *
3948 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3949 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3950 * for a single hardware.
3951 *
3952 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3953 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3954 */
3955static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3956 struct sk_buff *skb)
3957{
3958 local_bh_disable();
3959 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3960 local_bh_enable();
3961}
3962
3963/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003964 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003965 *
3966 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3967 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3968 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003969 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3970 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003971 *
3972 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3973 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003974 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003975void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003976 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003977
3978/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003979 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3980 *
3981 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3982 * connected STA.
3983 *
3984 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3985 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3986 */
3987void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3988
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003989#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3990
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003991/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003992 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3993 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3994 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003995 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3996 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3997 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003998 */
3999struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4000 u16 tim_offset;
4001 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004002
4003 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004004};
4005
4006/**
4007 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4008 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4009 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4010 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4011 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4012 *
4013 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4014 * obtain the beacon template.
4015 *
4016 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4017 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004018 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4019 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004020 *
4021 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4022 *
4023 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4024 */
4025struct sk_buff *
4026ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4027 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4028 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4029
4030/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004031 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4032 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004034 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4035 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4036 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4037 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4038 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4039 *
4040 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004041 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004042 *
4043 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4044 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004045 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4046 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004047 *
4048 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004049 *
4050 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004051 */
4052struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4054 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4055
4056/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004057 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4058 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004059 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004060 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004061 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004062 *
4063 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004064 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004065static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4066 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4067{
4068 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4069}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004070
4071/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004072 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4074 *
4075 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4076 * This function is called implicitly when
4077 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4078 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4079 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4080 *
4081 * Return: new csa counter value
4082 */
4083u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4084
4085/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004086 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4087 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4088 *
4089 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004090 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004091 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4092 */
4093void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4094
4095/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004096 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004097 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4098 *
4099 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4100 */
4101bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4102
4103
4104/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004105 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4106 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4107 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4108 *
4109 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4110 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4111 *
4112 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004113 *
4114 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004115 */
4116struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4117 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4118
4119/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004120 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4121 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4122 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4123 *
4124 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4125 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4126 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4127 *
4128 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4129 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004130 *
4131 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004132 */
4133struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4135
4136/**
4137 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4138 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4139 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4140 *
4141 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4142 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4143 * BSSID and address is used.
4144 *
4145 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4146 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004147 *
4148 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004149 */
4150struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4151 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4152
4153/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004154 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4155 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004156 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004157 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4158 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004159 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004160 *
4161 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4162 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004163 *
4164 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004165 */
4166struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004167 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004168 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004169 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004170
4171/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004172 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4173 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004174 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004175 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4176 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004177 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004178 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4179 *
4180 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4181 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4182 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4183 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4184 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004185void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004186 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004187 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004188 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4189
4190/**
4191 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4192 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004193 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004194 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004195 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004196 *
4197 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4198 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4199 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004200 *
4201 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004202 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004203__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004205 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004206
4207/**
4208 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4209 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004211 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4212 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004213 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004214 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4215 *
4216 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4217 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4218 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4219 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4220 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004221void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4222 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004223 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004224 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004225 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4226
4227/**
4228 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4229 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004230 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004231 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004232 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004233 *
4234 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4235 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4236 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004237 *
4238 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004239 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004240__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4241 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004242 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004243 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004244
4245/**
4246 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4247 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004248 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004249 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004250 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004251 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004252 *
4253 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4254 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004255 *
4256 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004257 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004258__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004260 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004261 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004262 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004263
4264/**
4265 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4266 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004267 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004268 *
4269 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4270 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4271 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4272 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004273 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4274 *
4275 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4276 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004277 *
4278 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4279 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4280 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4281 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4282 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4283 * use common code for all beacons.
4284 */
4285struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004286ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004287
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004288/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004289 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4290 *
4291 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4292 *
4293 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4294 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4295 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4296 */
4297void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4298 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4299
4300/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004301 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004302 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004303 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4304 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004305 *
4306 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004307 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4308 * with this P1K
4309 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004310 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004311static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4312 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4313{
4314 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4315 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4316 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4317
4318 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4319}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004320
4321/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004322 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4323 *
4324 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4325 * and transmitter address.
4326 *
4327 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4328 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4329 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4330 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4331 */
4332void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4333 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4334
4335/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004336 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4337 *
4338 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4339 * in the packet.
4340 *
4341 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4342 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4343 * encrypted with this key
4344 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4345 */
4346void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4347 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004348
4349/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004350 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4351 *
4352 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4353 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4354 *
4355 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4356 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4357 * offloaded to the device.
4358 *
4359 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4360 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4361 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4362 */
4363void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4364 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4365
4366/**
4367 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4368 *
4369 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004370 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004371 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4372 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4373 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4374 *
4375 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4376 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4377 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4378 *
4379 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4380 * can be done concurrently.
4381 */
4382void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4383 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4384
4385/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004386 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4387 *
4388 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4389 * @seq: new sequence data
4390 *
4391 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4392 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4393 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4394 * ARP requests.
4395 *
4396 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4397 * can be done concurrently.
4398 */
4399void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4400 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4401
4402/**
4403 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4404 *
4405 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004406 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004407 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4408 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4409 * @seq: new sequence data
4410 *
4411 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4412 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4413 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4414 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4415 *
4416 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4417 * can be done concurrently.
4418 */
4419void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4420 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4421
4422/**
4423 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4424 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4425 *
4426 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4427 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4428 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4429 *
4430 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4431 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4432 */
4433void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4434
4435/**
4436 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4437 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4438 * @keyconf: new key data
4439 *
4440 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4441 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4442 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4443 *
4444 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4445 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4446 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4447 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4448 *
4449 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4450 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4451 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4452 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4453 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4454 * of the reconfiguration.
4455 *
4456 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4457 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4458 *
4459 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4460 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4461 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4462 * the key that's being replaced.
4463 */
4464struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4465ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4466 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4467
4468/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004469 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4470 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4471 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4472 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4473 * @gfp: allocation flags
4474 */
4475void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4476 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4477
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004478/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004479 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4480 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4481 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4482 *
4483 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4484 */
4485void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4486
4487/**
4488 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4489 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4490 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4491 *
4492 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4493 */
4494void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4495
4496/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004497 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4498 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4499 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4500 *
4501 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004502 *
4503 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004504 */
4505
4506int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4507
4508/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004509 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4510 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4511 *
4512 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4513 */
4514void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4515
4516/**
4517 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4518 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4519 *
4520 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4521 */
4522void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4523
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004524/**
4525 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4526 *
4527 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4528 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004529 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4530 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004531 *
4532 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004533 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004534 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004535void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004536
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004537/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004538 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4539 *
4540 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4541 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4542 *
4543 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4544 */
4545void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4546
4547/**
4548 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4549 *
4550 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4551 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4552 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4553 * while associating, for instance.
4554 *
4555 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4556 */
4557void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4558
4559/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004560 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4561 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4562 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4563 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4564 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4565 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4566 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4567 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004568 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004569 */
4570enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4571 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4572 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004573 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004574};
4575
4576/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004577 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4578 *
4579 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4580 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4581 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4582 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4583 *
4584 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4585 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4586 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4587 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4588 */
4589void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4590 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4592 void *data);
4593
4594/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004595 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004596 *
4597 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4598 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004599 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4600 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4601 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004602 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004603 *
4604 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004605 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004606 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004607 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4608 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004609static inline void
4610ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4611 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4612 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4613 void *data)
4614{
4615 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4616 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4617 iterator, data);
4618}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004619
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004620/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004621 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4622 *
4623 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4624 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4625 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4626 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004627 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004628 *
4629 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004630 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004631 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4632 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4633 */
4634void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004635 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004636 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4637 u8 *mac,
4638 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4639 void *data);
4640
4641/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004642 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4643 *
4644 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4645 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4646 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4647 *
4648 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4649 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4650 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4651 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4652 */
4653void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4654 u32 iter_flags,
4655 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4656 u8 *mac,
4657 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4658 void *data);
4659
4660/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004661 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4662 *
4663 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4664 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4665 * function for them.
4666 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4667 *
4668 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4669 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4670 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4671 */
4672void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4673 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4674 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4675 void *data);
4676/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004677 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4678 *
4679 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4680 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4681 *
4682 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4683 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4684 */
4685void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4686
4687/**
4688 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4689 *
4690 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4691 * workqueue.
4692 *
4693 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4694 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4695 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4696 */
4697void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4698 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4699 unsigned long delay);
4700
4701/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004702 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004703 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004704 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304705 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004706 *
4707 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004708 *
4709 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4710 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4711 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4712 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304713int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4714 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004715
4716/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004717 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004718 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004719 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4720 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4721 *
4722 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004723 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4724 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004725 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004726void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004727 u16 tid);
4728
4729/**
4730 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004731 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004732 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004733 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004734 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004735 *
4736 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4737 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4738 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4739 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004740int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004741
4742/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004743 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004744 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004745 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4746 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4747 *
4748 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004749 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4750 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004751 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004752void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004753 u16 tid);
4754
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004755/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004756 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4757 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004758 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004759 * @addr: station's address
4760 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004761 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4762 *
4763 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004764 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4765 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004766struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004767 const u8 *addr);
4768
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004769/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004770 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004771 *
4772 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004773 * @addr: remote station's address
4774 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004775 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004776 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4777 *
4778 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004779 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4780 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004781 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4782 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4783 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4784 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4785 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4786 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4787 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004788 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004789 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004790 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004791struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4792 const u8 *addr,
4793 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004794
4795/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004796 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4797 * @hw: the hardware
4798 * @pubsta: the station
4799 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4800 *
4801 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4802 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4803 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4804 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4805 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4806 *
4807 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4808 * manner.
4809 *
4810 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4811 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4812 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4813 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4814 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4815 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4816 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4817 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4818 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4819 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4820 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4821 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4822 * woke up while blocked or not.
4823 */
4824void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4825 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4826
4827/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004828 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4829 * @pubsta: the station
4830 *
4831 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4832 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4833 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4834 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4835 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004836 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4837 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4838 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4839 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4840 *
4841 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4842 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4843 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4844 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004845 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004846void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004847
4848/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004849 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4850 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4851 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4852 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4853 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4854 *
4855 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4856 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4857 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4858 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4859 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4860 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004861 *
4862 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4863 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4864 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004865 */
4866void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4867 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4868 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4870 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4871 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4872 void *data),
4873 void *iter_data);
4874
4875/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004876 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4877 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4878 * @iter: iterator function
4879 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4880 *
4881 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4882 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4883 * places while calling into the driver.
4884 *
4885 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4886 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4887 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004888 *
4889 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4890 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4891 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4892 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004893 */
4894void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4895 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4896 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4897 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4898 void *data),
4899 void *iter_data);
4900
4901/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004902 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4903 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4904 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4905 *
4906 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4907 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4908 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4909 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4910 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004911 * %NULL.
4912 *
4913 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004914 */
4915struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4917
4918/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004919 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4920 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004922 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004923 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004924 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004925 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4926 */
4927void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004928
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004929/**
4930 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4931 *
4932 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4933 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004934 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004935 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4936 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004937 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4938 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004939 *
4940 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4941 * without connection recovery attempts.
4942 */
4943void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4944
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004945/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004946 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4947 *
4948 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4949 *
4950 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4951 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4952 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4953 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4954 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4955 *
4956 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4957 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4958 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4959 * disconnect normally later.
4960 *
4961 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4962 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4963 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4964 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4965 */
4966void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4967
4968/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004969 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4970 * rssi threshold triggered
4971 *
4972 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4973 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4974 * @gfp: context flags
4975 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004976 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004977 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4978 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4979 */
4980void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4981 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4982 gfp_t gfp);
4983
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004984/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004985 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4986 *
4987 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4988 * @gfp: context flags
4989 */
4990void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4991
4992/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004993 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4994 *
4995 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4996 */
4997void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4998
4999/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005000 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5001 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5002 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5003 *
5004 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5005 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5006 */
5007void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5008
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005009/**
5010 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5011 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005012 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005013 *
5014 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5015 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5016 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5017 */
5018void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5019 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5020
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005021/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005022 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5023 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5024 */
5025void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5026
5027/**
5028 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5029 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5030 */
5031void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5032
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005033/**
5034 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5035 *
5036 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5037 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5038 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5039 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5040 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5041 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5042 *
5043 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5044 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5045 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5046 */
5047void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5048 const u8 *addr);
5049
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005050/**
5051 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5052 *
5053 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5054 * buffer.
5055 *
5056 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5057 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5058 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5059 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5060 */
5061void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5062
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005063/**
5064 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5065 *
5066 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5067 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5068 * reordering.
5069 *
5070 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5071 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5072 *
5073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5074 * @addr: station mac address
5075 * @tid: the rx tid
5076 */
5077void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5078 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5079
5080/**
5081 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5082 *
5083 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5084 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5085 * reordering.
5086 *
5087 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5088 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5089 *
5090 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5091 * @addr: station mac address
5092 * @tid: the rx tid
5093 */
5094void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5095 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5096
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005097/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005098
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005099/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005100 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005101 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005102 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5103 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5104 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005105 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5106 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005107 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5108 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5109 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5110 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5111 * RTS threshold
5112 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5113 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005114 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005115 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5116 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005117 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005118 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005119 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005120 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005121struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5122 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5123 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5124 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5125 struct sk_buff *skb;
5126 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5127 bool rts, short_preamble;
5128 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005129 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005130 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005131 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005132};
5133
5134struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005135 const char *name;
5136 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005137 void (*free)(void *priv);
5138
5139 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5140 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005141 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305143 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005144 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005145 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5146 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005147 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5148 void *priv_sta);
5149
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005150 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5151 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5152 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5153 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005154 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5155 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5156 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005157 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5158 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005159
5160 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5161 struct dentry *dir);
5162 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005163
5164 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005165};
5166
5167static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5168 enum ieee80211_band band,
5169 int index)
5170{
5171 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5172}
5173
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005174/**
5175 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5176 *
5177 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5178 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5179 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5180 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5181 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5182 * not null.
5183 *
5184 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5185 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5186 *
5187 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5188 * that this may be null.
5189 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5190 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5191 */
5192bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5193 void *priv_sta,
5194 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5195
5196
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005197static inline s8
5198rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5199 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5200{
5201 int i;
5202
5203 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5204 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5205 return i;
5206
5207 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005208 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005209
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005210 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005211 return 0;
5212}
5213
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005214static inline
5215bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5216 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5217{
5218 unsigned int i;
5219
5220 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5221 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5222 return true;
5223 return false;
5224}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005225
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005226/**
5227 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5228 *
5229 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5230 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5231 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5232 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5233 *
5234 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5235 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5236 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5237 */
5238int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5239 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5240 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5241
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005242int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5243void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005244
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005245static inline bool
5246conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5247{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005248 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005249}
5250
5251static inline bool
5252conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5253{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005254 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5255 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005256}
5257
5258static inline bool
5259conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5260{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005261 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5262 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005263}
5264
5265static inline bool
5266conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5267{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005268 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005269}
5270
5271static inline bool
5272conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5273{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005274 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5275 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5276 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005277}
5278
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005279static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5280ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5281{
5282 if (p2p) {
5283 switch (type) {
5284 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5285 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5286 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5287 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5288 default:
5289 break;
5290 }
5291 }
5292 return type;
5293}
5294
5295static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5296ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5297{
5298 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5299}
5300
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005301void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5302 int rssi_min_thold,
5303 int rssi_max_thold);
5304
5305void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005306
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005307/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005308 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005309 *
5310 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5311 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005312 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5313 *
5314 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5315 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005316 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005317int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5318
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005319/**
5320 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5321 * @vif: virtual interface
5322 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5323 * @gfp: allocation flags
5324 *
5325 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5326 */
5327void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5328 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5329 gfp_t gfp);
5330
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005331/**
5332 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5333 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5334 * @vif: virtual interface
5335 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5336 * @band: the band to transmit on
5337 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5338 *
5339 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5340 */
5341bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5342 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5343 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5344
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005345/**
5346 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5347 *
5348 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5349 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5350 *
5351 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5352 *
5353 * private:
5354 *
5355 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5356 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5357 */
5358struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5359 u32 next_tsf;
5360 bool has_next_tsf;
5361
5362 u8 absent;
5363
5364 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5365 struct {
5366 u32 start;
5367 u32 duration;
5368 u32 interval;
5369 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5370};
5371
5372/**
5373 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5374 *
5375 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5376 * @data: NoA tracking data
5377 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5378 *
5379 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5380 */
5381int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5382 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5383
5384/**
5385 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5386 *
5387 * @data: NoA tracking data
5388 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5389 */
5390void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5391
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005392/**
5393 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5394 * @vif: virtual interface
5395 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5396 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5397 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5398 * @gfp: allocation flags
5399 *
5400 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5401 */
5402void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5403 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5404 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005405
5406/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005407 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5408 *
5409 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5410 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5411 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5412 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5413 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5414 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5415 *
5416 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5417 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5418 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5419 *
5420 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5421 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5422 *
5423 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5424 */
5425int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5426
5427/**
5428 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5429 *
5430 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5431 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5432 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5433 *
5434 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5435 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5436 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5437 *
5438 * @sta: the station
5439 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5440 */
5441void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5442
5443/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005444 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5445 *
5446 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5447 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5448 *
5449 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5450 */
5451struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5452 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005453#endif /* MAC80211_H */